Yamaha RX-V1079 Owner's manual

Yamaha RX-V1079 Owner's manual
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
English
CONTENTS
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 39
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PREPARATIONS
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
15
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PLAYBACK
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
56
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 35
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
En
2
CONFIGURATIONS
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
100
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 128
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 130
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
En
3
APPENDIX
135
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
En
4
Accessories
Operating range of the remote control
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
 Remote control
 Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
 AM antenna
 FM antenna
• The illustrations of the remote control used in this manual are of the Australia model, unless otherwise
specified.
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
 YPAO microphone
• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.
• (China model only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for
Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
 Power cable
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and
“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.
 CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
 Easy Setup Guide
 Safety Brochure
En
5
•
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
•
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
• Bluetooth
. p.68
• iPod/iPhone
. p.69
• USB
. p.72
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.75
• Internet radio
. p.79
• AirPlay
. p.82
Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.39
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.60
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
• Enjoying compressed music with
. p.64
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
Control
Network contents
Speakers
iPod/iPhone/
Bluetooth device
Audio
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system
. p.22
Audio
USB device
HDMI Control
4K Ultra HD signals and
HDCP 2.2 supported
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
BD/DVD player
Audio/Video
TV
AV receiver (the unit)
Playback of Dolby Atmos contents
supported
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.17
. p.57
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
TV remote control
En
6
. p.151
Full of useful functions!
Useful tips
❑ Connecting various devices (p.30)
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.60)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
Connecting front presence speakers allows you to
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own
room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence
speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker
(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In
addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker
(VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field even when no surround
back speakers are connected.
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.28)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.99).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.116).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.119).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
HDMI Control
TV audio
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.98).
Video from
external device
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
❑ Various wireless connection methods
(p.47)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.
VSBS
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37).
I want to update the firmware...
❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.62)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5
speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.132). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.134).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.100)
• SCENE settings (p.102)
Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct
❑ Low power consumption (p.127)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.
• Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.105)
• Various function settings (p.109)
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.128)
• System settings (p.130)
En
7
Useful applications
■ AV CONTROLLER
■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)
“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control
for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control
the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source.
“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between
AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides
you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio
device connections and selecting the speaker system.
Functions
Functions
• Power on/off and volume adjustment
• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)
• Input, scene and sound mode selection
• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations)
• DSP Parameter adjustment
• Viewing owner’s manual
• Playback control (including music selection for some sources)
• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play.
• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play.
En
8
Part names and functions
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
VOLUME
ON SCREEN
OPTION
SCENE
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1
2
3
INFO(WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
5V
6
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.119)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.120)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.121)
• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.122)
• An iPod is being charged (p.69)
1A
YPAO MIC
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
7
HDMI IN
8
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.64).
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.10).
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
3 Front display
Displays information (p.11).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
En
Opening the front panel door
9
■ Inside of the front panel door
9
0
AB C
ON SCREEN
OPTION
DE
F
GH
SCENE
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1
2
3
IJ
K
INFO(WPS)
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
L
4
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
5V
1A
M
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.96).
B DISPLAY key
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
N
O
VIDEO
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.97).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2
(p.90).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.63).
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
P
E PROGRAM keys
J FM and AM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.59).
F SCENE keys
G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
Switch between FM and AM (p.65).
K PRESET keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.57).
Displays status information on the TV (p.95).
C TONE/BALANCE key
L
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.66).
Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.91).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.65).
Enables/disables the audio output to
Zone2 (p.89).
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)
that is controlled by the keys and knobs
on the front panel (p.89).
H INFO (WPS) key
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.72) or an iPod
(p.69).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.39).
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.50).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.66).
Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.91).
En
10
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.33).
Front display (indicators)
1 23
4
6
5
7
8
9
ECO
MUTE VOLUME
ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP
3
4
IN OUT 1 2 3 2
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
3
0A
B
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
2 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.127).
3 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.47).
4 ZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.89).
5 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
6 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.95).
Blinks when audio is muted.
FPL L C R FPR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
CD E
1 HDMI
7 MUTE
ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
EF
8 Volume indicator
G
E Cursor indicators
Indicates the current volume.
9 VIRTUAL
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
F ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.60), or the virtual
surround processing (p.62) is working.
0 Bluetooth indicator
Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device
(p.68).
A ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) is
working.
B CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.60) is working. “CINEMA
DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) is activated.
C STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
D PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.90)
En
11
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.97) is working.
G Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
N Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
Rear panel
1
2 3
4
5
6
8
9 :
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
7
1
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AB
( 3 NET )
C
WIRELESS
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AC IN
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV 1
ZONE OUT
L
PB
PR Y
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
C
AV 3
PB
PR
1
2
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
SINGLE
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.32).
2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.32).
3 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.30).
4 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.28). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.30), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.87).
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
component/composite video jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.29) or for
connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.86).
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.35).
A Wireless antenna
For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47).
B RS-232C terminal
6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.30).
7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.31).
8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.36).
9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.88).
En
0 NETWORK jack
12
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
C AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36).
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
1
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
( 3 NET )
WIRELESS
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AC IN
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV 1
ZONE OUT
L
PB
PR Y
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
C
AV 3
PB
PR
1
2
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
SINGLE
D
E
D ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.34).
E ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.86).
F
G
F SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.16).
G PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.20) or
to an external power amplifier (p.26).
En
13
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
1
Transmits infrared signals.
2 z (receiver power) key
2
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
AV
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
5
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
6
PROGRAM
7
TOP MENU
8
VOLUME
MUTE
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
9
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
ENTER
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7
AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks
PHONO
PHONO jacks
TUNER
FM/AM radio
BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection
(the unit as a Bluetooth receiver)
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.89).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.57).
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
K
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.65).
BAND
Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET
Select a preset station.
TUNING
Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.151).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.59).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.66).
F HDMI OUT key
6 PROGRAM keys
RETURN
:
A
3 Input selection keys
A Radio keys
Select a sound program (p.59).
7 External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback
device (p.151).
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.56).
G PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.90).
H VOLUME keys
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Mutes the audio output.
J OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.96).
K DISPLAY key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.71).
Displays status information on the TV (p.95).
• (China model only)
For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
En
14
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers (p.16)
Basic speaker configuration (p.17)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.22)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.
2 Connecting a TV (p.28)
Connect a TV to the unit.
3 Connecting playback devices (p.30)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.34)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
5
Connecting a network cable or preparing
the wireless antenna (p.35)
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for
establishing a wireless network connection.
6 Connecting other devices (p.36)
Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.36)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
9
Configuring the necessary speaker settings
(p.38)
According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before
performing YPAO.
10
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.39)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
11
Connecting to a network device wirelessly
(p.47)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
En
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.22).
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20).
Ideal speaker layout
Functions of each speaker
Speaker type
Abbr.
Front (L)
1
Function
Front (R)
2
Center
3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L)
4
Surround (R)
5
Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also
produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Surround
back (L)
6
E
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
7
Front
presence (L)
E
Front
presence (R)
R
Subwoofer
9
1
9
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Surround
back (R)
R
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
2
3
9
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP
3D (p.60), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional
sound field in your room.
4
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces
bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
5
10°~30°
10°~30°
6
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.
However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.60).
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
En
16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your
room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.
• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead
speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence
speaker layout” (p.19).
❑ 7.1+2-channel system [★5.1.2]
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This
system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.
❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.60).
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
En
17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 5.1-channel system
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
E
R
1
9
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual
Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to
the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for
7.1-channel contents.
2
3
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
❑ 2.1-channel system
❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
1
2
4
9
5
3
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
En
18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ Presence speaker layout
Dolby Enabled SP
The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead
and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.
Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.
It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from
speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.
• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.
Front Height
Install the presence speakers on the front side wall.
It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom
sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.
• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled
speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
Dolby Enabled speakers.
Notes on installation of ceiling speakers
When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening
position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position.
Overhead
Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.
It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of
front and rear sound spaces effectively.
FPR
SR
FR
SBR
C
SBL
FL
FPL
SL
• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”
(p.19).
Caution
• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified
contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.
En
19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
■ Setting the speaker impedance
■ Connecting speakers
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Speakers to be connected
STRAIGHT
Room
3
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
4
5
¡SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Main zone
Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Speaker type
Abbr.
7+2
7
5
2
Front (L)
1
●
●
●
●
Front (R)
2
●
●
●
●
Center
3
●
●
●
Surround (L)
4
●
●
*3
Surround (R)
5
●
●
*3
Surround
back (L)
6
●
*1
Surround
back (R)
7
●
*1
Front
presence (L)
E
●
*2
*4
Front
presence (R)
R
●
*2
*4
Power Amp
Assign
(p.112)
Basic (default)
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front
presence speakers (*2).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.26).
En
20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
❑ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
+
–
+
–
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
Connection diagram
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
(SINGLE)
1
d Tighten the terminal.
2
The unit (rear)
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
+ (red)
+
b
FR
c
ON
T
-
a
d
SINGLE
– (black)
Using a banana plug
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
E
R
1
9
3
a
Banana plug
2
+
FR
ON
T
b
9
❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
4
5
6
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Audio pin cable
7
PRE
OUT
(SING
LE)
1
2
SURR
UND
SUR.
BACK
SUBW
OOFE
R
SURR
OUN
D BA
CK
CENT
ER
L
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
En
21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.17), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Bi-amp connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
Power-amp channel expansion
(Example)
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
En
22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
■ Available speaker configurations
❑ 5ch BI-AMP
Main zone
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
5

7

7
Bi-amp
External
power
amplifier
(required)
Multi-zone
Surround
back
+1 (Zone2)
Power Amp Assign
(p.112)
Page
5ch BI-AMP
23
5ch BI-AMP +SB
24
7ch +1ZONE
24
1
9
4
2
3
9
5
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the
“Setup” menu (p.38).
Speaker
En
23
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
(not used)
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1–2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB
❑ 7ch +1ZONE
Bi-amp
1
9
1
2
3
9
9
4
1
5
6
7
2
9
3
4
5
6
2
7
Zone2
Main zone
via external amp
Speaker
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1–2
9
SUBWOOFER 1–2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.89), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
En
24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections
■ Connecting Zone2 speakers
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall
outlet (p.38).
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”
menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38).
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
R
L
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
1
1
9
2
2
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
3
FL
5
6
9
FR
9
4
3
4
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
SINGLE
SINGLE
9
L
7
Zone2
5
Main zone
• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.86).
• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
En
25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the
input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel
signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
V2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
( 3 NET )
WIRELESS
AV 7
Main input jack
R OUT/
OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
Caution
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
2
A
Y
AV 1
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
PB
PRE OUT
PR Y
(SINGLE)
C
AV 3
PB
RS-232C
MAIN IN
OUT
PR
PR
1
L
L
2
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
R
SPEAKERS
ROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
FRONT
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.
CENTER
R
R
FRONT
L
SUR
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
( 3 NET )
WIRELESS
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
AC IN
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
A
Y
AV 1
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
PR Y
(SINGLE)
C
AV 3
PB
PR
1
2
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SINGLE
1 23
4
About external power amplifiers
1 FRONT jacks
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
Output front channel sounds.
• With unbalanced inputs
2 SURROUND jacks
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
Output surround channel sounds.
• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )
3 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
En
26
Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
AV 1
HDMI cable
Digital optical cable
Component video cable
A
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
Y
AV 1
PR
PB
❑ COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑ VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Digital coaxial cable
AV 1
Video pin cable
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
Stereo pin cable
En
27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
■ HDMI connection
■ Component/composite video connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30).
HDMI OUT jack
The unit (rear)
HDM
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1
1
AV 3
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 3
2
AV 2
(HDCP2.2)
1
HDMI input
ARC
HDMI
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
PB
Y
HDMI
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
A
Y
AUDIO 1
L
AV 1
ZONE OUT
PB
PRE OUT
(S
SURROUND
SU
HDMI
(2 TV)
• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
R
AUDIO
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
R
FRONT
SURROUND
L
L
R
L
L
R
R
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
R
TV
1 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.151).
En
28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
1
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
HONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COM
Y
PR
AV
B
A
AV 1
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PR Y
2 OPTICAL
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 3
AV 2
AV 4
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
PR
(SINGLE)
PB
Y
C
AV
1
2
1 OPTICAL
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
AV 1
1
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
Y
GND
(HDCP2.2)
2
Video input (composite video)
HDMI (HDCP2
HDMI OUT
AV 1
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
R
FRONT
SURROUND
L
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
R
SUBWOOFER
PR
V
Video input
(component video)
PR
PB
PHONO
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
A
Y
AUDIO 1
L
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
AUDIO 1
Y
PB
PB
PRE OUT
PR
(SINGLE)
AUDIO
R
PR
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
R
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
FM
AV 1
ZONE OUT
(2 TV)
SURROUND BACK
PR
75Ω
V
AM
PB
FRONT
SURROUND
L
SURROUND
L
SUR. BACK
R
SURROU
L
L
R
R
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
AUDIO 1
Y
(2 TV)
75Ω
FM
SING
AM
R
TV
AUDIO
L
L
L
R
R
1 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
R
O
TV
1 OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
En
29
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
3 Connecting playback devices
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.56).
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.69)
HDMI
HDMI OUT 2 jack
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.72)
HDMI OUT
The unit
(rear)
(HDCP2.2)
2
1
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
TV
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
1
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV
ZONE OUT
L
HDMI
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
R
HDMI input
FRONT
SURROUND
L
HDMI
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.150).
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
TV (already connected)
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.125) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.
Projector
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu.
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.87).
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
I OUT
CP2.2)
1
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
N
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
HDMI output
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
OUT
2
A
Y
AV 1
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
PR Y
(SINGLE)
C
AV 3
PB
PR
HDMI
HDMI
2
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
HDMI
1
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
SINGLE
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
En
30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
■ Component video connection
■ Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Input jacks on the unit
Audio
Video
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
Component video
Audio
Composite video
AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
Y
The unit (rear)
PB
PR
PR
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
AV 1
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
(1 BD/DVD
ARC
AV 3
AV 4
Video output
(composite video)
PB
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
PHONO
Y
AV 6
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
V
(2 TV)
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
ZONE
L
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGE
OUT
PR
VIDEO
R
B
1
Video output
(component video)
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
2
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV 1
ZONE OUT
L
PB
PR Y
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
C
AV 3
PB
PR
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
V
R
1
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
2
R
PR
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
R
L
R
SURROUND BACK
Y
PB
75Ω
PR
FM
AM
CENTER
L
PB
ZONE 2/F.PRESEN
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
C
C
Y
COAXIAL
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
O
C
C
L
SINGLE
COAXIAL
O
Video device
Video device
O
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
O
R
L
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
R
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
En
31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
PHONO
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
PHONO
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.125) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL
(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.
Ground lead
GND
GND
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu.
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
1
Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)
AV 2
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
Turntable
Y
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV
ZONE OUT
L
Audio output jacks on audio device
AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 3
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
ZONE 2
6 OPTICAL
R
FRONT
SURROUND
L
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
Digital optical
AV 3 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO)
FM
AM
C
C
COAXIAL
Turntable (PHONO)
O
The unit
(rear)
PHONO
Audio device
O
L
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
R
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
En
32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.69) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.72).
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
FM
AM
TUNING
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
❑ HDMI connection
5V
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
V
L
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
R
The unit (front)
(CONNECT)
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
FM
AM
TUNING
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
HDMI IN
HDMI
The unit (front)
Game console
Camcorder
Game console
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)
jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
Camcorder
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT
jack of the unit (p.28).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.
En
33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Assembling the AM antenna
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
RE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
IN
2
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV 1
ZONE OUT
L
PB
PR Y
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
C
AV 3
PB
PR
1
2
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
Connecting the AM antenna
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
Hold down
ANTENNA
Insert
Release
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
En
34
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless
antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the network cable
Preparing the wireless antenna
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up
straight.
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.47).
WAN
LAN
Modem
PC
Network cable
The unit (rear)
Router
ESS
WIREL
NETWORK
AV 6
( 3 NET )
WIRELESS
AV 7
AC IN
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
TRIGGER
OUT
1
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
REMOTE
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
PR
• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set
“Network Connection” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.120).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.129) in the “Information” menu.
En
35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
6 Connecting other devices
7 Connecting the power cable
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The unit (rear)
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks
with a monaural mini-plug cable.
NETWORK
NETWORK
AV 4
PB
AV 5
AV 6
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
AV 7
PR
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
OUT
2
PR Y
E OUT
(SINGLE)
ROUND
SUR. BACK
C
AV 3
PB
( 3 NET )
WIREL
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
B
PB
CENTER
1
TRIGGER
OUT
RS-232C
2
PR
1
System connector
jack
2
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SINGLE
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.126) in the
“Setup” menu.
En
RS-232C
OUT
TRIGGER
OUT
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
3
WIRELESS
AC IN
OTE
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
The unit (rear)
( 3 NET )
36
To an AC wall outlet
R
FRONT
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
7
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
5
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
4
En
37
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z
9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the
procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings
manually before performing YPAO.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
6
When using any of advanced speaker configurations
• Advanced speaker configuration (p.22)
a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.112) and
press ENTER.
• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) (p.18)
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and
press ENTER.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.19)
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
1
2
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel
system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 
“Layout”  “Surround” (p.113).
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.
When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos
playback
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 
“Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.113).
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”
and then “Manual Setup”.
4
Configure the corresponding speaker settings.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
En
38
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence
speaker layout and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
3
4
TV
NET
RADIO
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
YPAO MIC
jack
The unit (front)
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position
and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
SCENE
BD/DVD
4
YPAO MIC
TOP MENU
• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
OPTION
1
– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
ENTER
2
– Keep the room as quiet as possible.
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
RETURN
– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
9
3
– Do not connect headphones.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network
setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
9
MAX
En
39
4
YPAO
5
microphone
Ear height
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
The following screen appears on the TV.
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
AUDIO
Single measure
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
5
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
If desired, change the measuring method
(multi/single).
d
e
bac
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)
BAND
MODE
TUNING
a
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
b
c a e
d
c
a b
d
Settings
Yes
No (default)
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions
in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit
the area defined by those positions (multi measure).
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.42)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.41)
En
40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE 2
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the
measurement.
AUDIO
MAIN
3
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
TOP MENU
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
En
41
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the
“Option” menu.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
5
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
Caution
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46).
SCENE
1
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
En
42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the
“Option” menu.
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
En
43
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Checking the measurement results
3
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
The following screen appears.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.108).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
1
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
3
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
1 Measurement result items
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
2 Measurement result details
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
En
44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
E-1:No Front SP
Front speakers are not detected.
E-2:No Sur. SP
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3:No F.PRNS SP
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4:SBR → SBL
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5:Noisy
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6:Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7:No MIC
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8:No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9:User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-10:Internal Err.
Remedy
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
En
45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.44) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.44) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.44) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
En
46
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
The unit
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.54).
Wireless router
• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or the
wireless network connection (p.48).
Modem
• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
– Internet radio
– Network services
– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
The unit
• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48).
• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.35) or Wireless Direct (p.54).
• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
En
47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
AV
7
V-AUX
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
1
2
3
PHONO
Select a connection method according to your environment.
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
5
2
3
4
6
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPod touch)?
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
Yes
A (p.48)
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Does your wireless router
(access point) have a WPS
button?
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
No
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
No
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
B (p.50)
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Yes
C (p.51)
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
1
2
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
En
48
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly
If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform
the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The
following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay
speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
The following connection methods are available.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Wireless (WAC)
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see
“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)
USB Cable
You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device
to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing
the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.
(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
2
Check the network currently selected and tap
“Next”.
Tap here to start setup
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
The name of the unit
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
The network currently selected
When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically
connected to the selected network (access point).
En
49
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable
z
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the
procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
1
2
SCENE
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
The unit (front)
RETURN
1
■ B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.
3
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for
3 seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
ON SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
4
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
50
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
■ C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.
1
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
3
4
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
4
7
The following connection methods are available.
Press ON SCREEN.
DISPLAY
MODE
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
8
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS
button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.48).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by searching
for an access point. For details on settings, see
“Searching for an access point” (p.52).
Manual Setting
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.52).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access
point). The method is available if the wireless
router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code
method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN
code” (p.53).
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
En
51
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
❑ Searching for an access point
❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
1
2
3
4
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.
2
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
1
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
SCENE
BD/DVD
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
En
52
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
2
3
ON SCREEN
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
OPTION
ENTER
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
❑ Using the PIN code
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
SCENE
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
DISPLAY
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
4
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
53
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
z
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE 2
1
2
3
4
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1
2
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.
• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
SCENE
BD/DVD
7
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
AUDIO
MAIN
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
ON SCREEN
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• The checkmark indicates the current setting.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
Settings
None, WPA2-PSK (AES)
• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
En
54
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64
hexadecimal digits.
1
2
3
4
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
SCENE
BD/DVD
11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.
En
55
PLAYBACK
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
Input selection keys
Basic playback procedure
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
ON SCREEN
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
ON
SCREEN
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
9
3
4
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
ENT
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
OUT 1+2
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65)
OUT 1
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.68)
OUT 2
• Playing back iPod music (p.69)
Off
HDMIOUTSel.
OUT1+2
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.72)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.75)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.82)
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.124)), you
can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
• Listening to Internet radio (p.79)
4
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.57).
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.97).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
En
56
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SCENE
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
SCENE (SCENE key)
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Input (p.56)
AV 1
AUDIO 1
NET RADIO
TUNER
Input
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
HDMI Output
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Audio Select (p.99)
Auto
Auto
—
—
HDMI Output (p.56)
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
DSP Program (p.59)
Sci-Fi
STRAIGHT
7ch Stereo
7ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.117)
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Enhancer (p.64)
Off
On
On
On
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.99)
On
On
On
On
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Mode
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.102).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
En
57
Configuring scene assignments
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
SCENE
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
SCENE1
SETComplete
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu.
• (China model only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of
the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details,
refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
En
58
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound
Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim
Video
Video Mode
Volume
Master Volume
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
Selecting the sound mode
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
SCENE
1
PROGRAM
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.60).
PROGRAM
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “DSP Program” menu (p.104).
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.128).
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.61).
DISPLAY
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
About Dolby Atmos®
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
BAND
MODE
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or
multichannel PCM format in the following situations.
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.63).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.63).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.64).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.64).
En
59
– Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.
– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.
– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).
• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such
as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.97) or Compressed
Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work.
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically
created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue,
sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of
the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and
background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge
on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long
periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sound program category
MUSIC
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
3
CLASSICAL
HallinVienna
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
Sound program
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic
sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual
Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound
fields.
• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,
the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of
depth to the rear sound field.
• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
En
60
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer
for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound
field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound
field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and
emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations
of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the
acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround
sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are
used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be
fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
En
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
61
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Hall in Amsterdam
The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.
Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.
Church in Freiburg
Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a
pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the
high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial
reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself
reproduces the atmosphere of the church.
Church in
Royaumont
This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)
of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the
outskirts of Paris.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
❑ LIVE/CLUB
Village Vanguard
The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low
ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in
the center.
Warehouse Loft
The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the
concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that
make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.18) and enjoy multichannel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
❑ STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.62) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
En
62
Enjoying unprocessed playback
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
1
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
OPTION
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.
• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system
and the selected decode type (p.105).
• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.145).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
ENTER
RETURN
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
DISPLAY
HD 3
STRAIGHT
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
BAND
bSurround
MODE
TUNING
¡SUR.¡DECODE
†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE
SUR.DECODE
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
9
3
4
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
ENT
• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works when multichannel source is played back.
bPLIIx Movie
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
bPLII Game
En
63
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all
sources. A real acoustic space (including
overhead) will be created especially when
object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content)
is played.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will
be output from the surround/surround back
speakers even when 2-channel source is input.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be
output from the surround/surround back speakers.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix
decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output
from the surround/surround back speakers.
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing
(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.97) or
Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back
speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except
when a Dolby Atmos content is played).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
1
DISPLAY
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of
uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)
when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”
(default).
1
PRESET
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
EnhancerOn
VOLUME
ENHANCER
SL
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
PUREDIRECT
HD 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
L C R
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
“ENHANCER” lights up
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
ENHANCER
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
– Using the multi-zone function
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
En
64
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.98) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
Listening to FM/AM radio
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
TUNER
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in Australia model.
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Selecting a frequency for reception
FM87.50MHz
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
3
OPTION
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
HD 3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
FM98.50MHz
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
STEREO TUNED
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
VOLUME
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
4
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
Numeric keys
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
En
65
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using
“Auto Preset” (p.67).
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
■ Registering a radio station
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
TUNER
SCENE
1
■ Selecting a preset station
Preset
01:FM98.50MHz
VOLUME
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
STEREO TUNED
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Preset number
Numeric keys
MEMORY
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:FM98.50MHz
PresetOK
VOLUME
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
STEREO TUNED
01:Empty
FM98.50MHz
VOLUME
SL
L C R
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
En
66
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.67).
■ Browse screen
Operating the radio on the TV
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
TUNER
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
3
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
2
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
■ Playback screen
1
TOP MENU
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
3
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Menu
MODE
TUNING
Submenu
Function
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
1 Preset station list
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
3
4
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
2 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
Utility
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
1 Page Up
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
En
67
1 Page Down
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Playing back music via Bluetooth
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such
as smartphones) on the unit.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
BLUETOOTH
Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection
between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit,
and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit.
The unit
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Playing back Bluetooth device music on the
unit
Bluetooth device
(such as smartphones)
• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
1
Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the
input source.
• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file
formats” (p.149).
2
On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network
name of the unit) from the available device list.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will
be made.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
3
3
4
On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start
playback.
The playback screen (artist name, album name and song
title) is displayed on the TV.
• “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected.
• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit
automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish
another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth
connection.
• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following
operations.
– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.
– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.
– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
En
68
Playing back iPod music
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
USB
• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.149).
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on
the unit, use AirPlay (p.82).
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
SCENE
1
Playback of iPod content
Connecting an iPod
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
1
2
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
PHONES
3
4
5V
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
USB
Connected
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
En
69
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.71).
■ Browse screen
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
■ Playback screen
1
2
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
OPTION
3 Contents list
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
BAND
MODE
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
2 List name
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
MOVIE
3
5
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback.
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
En
70
■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
MAIN
ZONE 2
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Operate your iPod itself to start playback.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
AUDIO
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
POP-UP/MENU
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
OPTION
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
3
Item
BAND
MODE
MODE
TUNING
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
PRESET
Setting
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
MEMORY
ENT
9
Repeat
(Repeat)
4
En
71
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
USB
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.149).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
ENTER
ON SCREEN
OPTION
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
(CONNECT)
RETURN
PROGRAM
DISPLAY
ENTER
BAND
RETURN
DISPLAY
MODE
PHONES
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
5V
1A
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
USB storage device
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
USB
Connected
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
En
72
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
2
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
■ Browse screen
1
2
3
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
AUDIO
1
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
5
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
2 List name
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
3 Contents list
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.91).
MUSIC
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Menu
Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
En
73
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
■ Playback screen
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
2
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
3
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
2 Playback information
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
External device
operation keys
PRESET
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
MODE
TUNING
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Setting
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
En
74
Repeat
(Repeat)
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
❑ For Windows Media Player 11
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.35). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.129) in the “Information” menu.
• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.149).
1
2
3
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
Media sharing setup
• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
❑ For Windows Media Player 12
1
2
3
4
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
En
75
Playback of PC music contents
3
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly
by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.91).
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
En
76
■ Browse screen
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
1
2
3
AUDIO
1
■ Playback screen
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
3
5
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.78) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
2 List name
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
OPTION
3 Contents list
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
BAND
MODE
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.78) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
Function
1 Page Up
Menu
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control
playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.101).
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
10 Pages Down
En
77
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
PRESET
Setting
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Repeat
(Repeat)
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
En
78
Listening to Internet radio
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
Playback of Internet radio
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
NET
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.35). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.129) in the “Information” menu.
1
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
2
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
4
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by
selecting the shortcut numbers (p.91).
En
79
■ Browse screen
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
4
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Playback indicator
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
2 Playback information
VOLUME
MUTE
TOP MENU
3
5
SCENE
1
PROGRAM
1
2
1
2
3
AUDIO
1
■ Playback screen
ON
SCREEN
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Contents list
POP-UP/MENU
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
Bookmark On
Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder
(p.81).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Menu
Function
Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.81).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop
playback.
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
10 Pages Down
En
80
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
3
■ Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
You can switch the language.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
1
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
DISPLAY
BAND
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
■ Registering the station on the vTuner
website
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.129) in the
“Information” menu.
En
81
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name.
• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in
the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station
name.
Playing back music with AirPlay
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
iTunes
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
PC
(wired or wireless)
1
Router
The unit
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon (
iTunes (example)
(wired or wireless)
iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)
) appears.
iPod iOS6 (example)
iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.129) in the “Information” menu.
• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.149).
• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.94).
Network name of the unit
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
En
82
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu.
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the
remote control to control playback.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.101) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
iTunes (example of English version)
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Caution
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
■ Playback screen
1
2
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Check this box
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
3
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Menu
Function
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
En
83
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
■ Enjoying videos/music in another room
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in
Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.151).
Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI)
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Study room
(Zone2)
■ Enjoying music in another room
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.
Living room (main zone)
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.86
TV (for digital video playback): p.87
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.86
Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)
Study room
(Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.86
En
84
❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
Video/audio (HDMI)
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Study room
(Zone2)
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Living room (main zone)
Connection
TV: p.87
❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.25).
En
85
❑ Using an external amplifier
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a
stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video
input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2) jacks
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
1
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.
Y
ZONE OUT
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV
ZONE OUT
L
L
R
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
R
FRONT
SURROUND
The unit (rear)
L
ZONE 2
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
ANTENNA
(HDCP2.2)
2
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
AM
ZONE OUT)
AV 2
1
AV 3
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
A
Y
AV 1
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
5 COAXIAL
R
6 OPTICAL
PR Y
(SINGLE)
PB
Y
ZONE 2
R
PB
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
L
PB
PR
B
FRONT
SURROUND
L
C
AV 3
PB
PR
2
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
R
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND BACK
PR
CENTER
L
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
ZONE
R BI–AM
Y
AUDIO
Video input
(component video or
composite video)
P
1
Y
PR
PB
PR
NA
O)
AM
PB
V
Y
SINGLE
ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)
VIDEO
V
Zone2
Main zone
Zone2
Main zone
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor
Out Assign” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
En
86
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2.
• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.25).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit
with an HDMI cable (p.30).
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
1
ARC
AV 1
2(1 B
(HDCP2.2)
(ZONE OUT)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
(1 BD/DVD)
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
HDMI
AV 4
(2 TV)
L
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
ZO
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Zone2
Main zone
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
En
87
■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control
supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
• (China model only)
You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for
each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
REMOTE
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Infrared signal
receiver
The unit (rear)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
AV 3
UT/
AV 4
PB
Y
NETWORK
AV 5
AV 6
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
(3N
AV 7
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
IN
RS-232
OUT
2
A
Y
AV 1
PB
PRE OUT
PR Y
(SINGLE)
C
AV 3
PB
REMOTE
IN
PR
OUT
1
Remote control
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
UND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
L
CENTER
R
Zone2
SINGLE
Infrared signal
transmitter
Infrared signal
receiver
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
Zone2
Main zone
En
88
z
Controlling Zone2
4
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
Input selection keys
1
2
MAIN/ZONE2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
3
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
Press z (receiver power).
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65)
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front
display.
• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.68)
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.72)
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you
connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.151).
• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each
zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is
selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches
to “SERVER”.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
• Listening to Internet radio (p.79)
• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.82)
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
or web control (p.92) to control Zone2.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
• Playing back iPod music (p.69)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.75)
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
4
• The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source
selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2
input with the web control (p.92) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8).
• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2
input or use the party mode (p.90).
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
En
89
■ Other operations for Zone2
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Adjusting the volume
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
MAIN
ZONE 2
PARTY
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
SCENE
MUTE
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
Setting the sleep timer
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
ENTER
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
RETURN
DISPLAY
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Press PARTY.
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display.
VOLUME
OPTION
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
SCENE
1
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
En
90
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.124) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
Registering favorite items (shortcut)
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as
shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut
numbers.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.81).
• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual
contents cannot be registered.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
1
2
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.
TUNING
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
HD 3
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
MemoryPreset
01:Empty
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number
(01 to 40).
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
RecallPreset
01:USB
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not
connected to the unit.
Shortcut number (flashes)
1
Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.
• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.
DOCK
TAG
HD
PRESET
1
2
Press MEMORY.
BAND
MODE
Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.
You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a
shortcut.
Registering an item
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Recalling a registered item
– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not
connected to the network.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use
numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
MemoryPreset
02:Empty
– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.
– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,
the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you
have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not
recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered
3
– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of
service.
To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.
En
91
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
Web browser
• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.129) in the “Information” menu.
• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.94) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.
Web control
(wired or wireless)
PC
• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.121), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.
Web control
• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.
(wired or wireless)
Router
The unit
– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8).
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.94) to “On”.
• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 7.x
1
2
Start the web browser.
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
En
92
■ Top menu screen
■ Control screen
3
1
5
1
6
2
3
4
4
5
7
2
1 CONTROL
6
1 PLAY INFO
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2 STATUS
2 TOP MENU
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 SETTINGS
3 SCENE
Moves to the settings screen.
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
4 PARTY MODE
4 POWER
Turns on/off the party mode (p.90).
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5 SYSTEM POWER
5 VOLUME
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
6 MAIN VOLUME
6 RELOAD
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
Reloads the current status of the unit.
7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
En
93
■ Settings screen
2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
1
Note
• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.
2
• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
3
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.122) or the name of each zone
(p.123). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.120) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.120). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
AirPlay Password
Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.82). Click “APPLY” to apply the
changes to the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.121) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.121).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
Licenses
Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.
En
94
Viewing the current status
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
MAIN
ZONE 2
Switching information on the front display
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
Compressed Music Enhancer status
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Info
AudioDecoder
Item name
TOP MENU
OPTION
ENTER
DOCK
TAG
HD
RETURN
DISPLAY
Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Sound
mode
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Input source/
Party mode
status
DISPLAY
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
BAND
¡¡¡¡AV1
†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
MODE
TUNING
Information
PRESET
CINEMA DSP status
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
3
4
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
Input source group
Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–3
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
Bluetooth
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
En
95
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
Option menu items
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
Option
ToneControl
• Default settings are underlined.
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Front display
Item
Function
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
97
Enables/disables YPAO Volume.
97
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
97
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Dialogue
(Dialog)
TV screen
2
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
4
Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
(Dialog Lvl)
98
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
98
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim)
(Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass
Enables/disables Extra Bass.
(Extra Bass)
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
98
Hi-Res Mode
(HiRes Mode)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for
enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio).
99
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
99
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
99
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
99
Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.
99
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
99
Input Settings Audio Select
(Input Settings) (A.Sel)
Video Out
(V.Out)
En
96
98
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
98
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Page
Item
Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.71),
USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.78).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.71),
USB storage device (p.74), or media server (p.78).
—
■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Page
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Settings
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Off (Off)
Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On)
Enables YPAO Volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.39).
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
Off (Off)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
On
Off
Input level
En
97
Volume: high
Output level
Output level
Volume: low
On
Off
Input level
■ Dialogue (Dialog)
■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Setting range
0 to 3
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.
Settings
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
Off (Off)
Disables Extra Bass.
On (On)
Enables Extra Bass.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.60) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64).
Ideal position
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• Compressed Music Enhancer works on both the main zone and Zone 2.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.64).
Settings
Off (Off)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Default
TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
En
98
Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this
function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio
(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.
Settings
Settings
On (On)
Enables the high-resolution mode.
(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio
signal processing condition.)
Off (Off)
Disables the high-resolution mode.
■ Video Processing (Video Process.)
Auto (Auto)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL
jack.
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu.
Analog (Analog)
Settings
Direct (Direct)
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.
Video Out (V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
■ Input Settings (Input Settings)
Off (Off)
Does not output video.
Configures the input settings.
AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Settings
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
En
99
Stereo (Stereo)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
CONFIGURATIONS
4
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Default settings are underlined.
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
En
100
Item
Function
Page
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon.
101
Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
101
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
101
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
101
■ Rename/Icon Select
■ Decoder Mode
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
Settings
Auto
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range
(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
Disable
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
101
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5
6
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.57) using the TV screen.
1
2
3
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
Item
Function
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
Page
102
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
103
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon.
104
Reset
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
104
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.58).
En
102
■ Load
Detail
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
Device Control
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if
an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Check or uncheck
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
Choices
Input
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.151).
Input (p.56), Audio Select (p.99)
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.56)
Mode
DSP Program (p.59), Pure Direct Mode (p.117), Enhancer (p.64),
Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.99)
Sound
Tone Control (p.97), YPAO Volume (p.97), Adaptive DRC (p.97),
Extra Bass (p.98)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.117), Dialogue Lift (p.98), Dialogue Level
(p.98), Subwoofer Trim (p.98)
Video
Video Mode (p.118)
Volume
Master Volume (p.56)
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.116), Delay (p.116)
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.112), PEQ Select (p.115)
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
En
103
■ Rename/Icon Select
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (DSP Program menu)
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Setup procedure
1
2
3
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.57) for the selected scene.
En
104
4
DSP Program menu items
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Settings for sound programs
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Item
Function
Decode Type
bSurround*, bPLIIx Movie
(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx
Music* (bPLII Music*),
Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music*
program.
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
En
105
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Settings
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Item
Function
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
Settings
Sound program
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Reverb Delay
Reverb Level
2ch Stereo
Item
Function
Settings
Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto, Off
Level
Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.
-5 to 0 to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the front
presence speakers.
0 to 5 to 10
Higher to enhance the upside,
and lower to enhance the
downside. (The front
presence speakers do not
produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to “0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off, On
7ch Stereo
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
En
106
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type
bSurround
Item
Function
Settings
Center Spread
Selects whether to
spread the center
channel signals to left
and right when
2-channel source is
played.
Off, On
Select “On” to spread center
channel signals to left and right if
you feel the center sound is too
strong when 2-channel source is
played.
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 3 to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to 0 to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Neo:6 Music
En
107
4
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
En
108
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
Auto Setup
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
39
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
112
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
112
Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
112
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
113
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
113
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
113
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
113
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
113
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
114
Layout
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
114
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
114
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
114
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
115
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
115
Speaker
Configuration
Page
Manual Setup
En
109
Menu
Item
Video
HDMI
Network
Bluetooth
Page
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
116
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
116
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
116
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
116
Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
116
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
117
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
117
Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
117
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
117
Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers.
117
Object Decode Mode
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents.
117
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
118
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
119
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
119
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
120
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
120
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
120
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
121
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
121
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
122
Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions.
122
Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit.
68
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby).
122
Lipsync
Sound
Function
Audio Receive
Disconnect
Bluetooth Standby
En
110
Menu
Item
Function
Page
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
123
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
123
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.
123
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
124
Audio Delay
Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing.
124
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
124
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
124
Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.
124
HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
124
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
124
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
125
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
125
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
125
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
125
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
126
Target Zone
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
126
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
126
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
127
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
127
Select an on-screen menu language.
127
Main Zone Set
Zone2 Set
Multi Zone
Display Set
Function
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
ECO
Language
En
111
■ Setting Data Copy
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Choices
Pattern1 > 2
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 > 1
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.
• Default settings are underlined.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2
subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
■ Setting Pattern
Basic
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.17).
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
7ch +1ZONE
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone
and Zone2 speakers (p.24).
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp
front speakers) (p.23).
5ch BI-AMP +SB
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp
front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an
external amplifier (p.24).
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
• Power Amp Assign
• Configuration
• Distance
■ Configuration
• Level
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1, Pattern2
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
En
112
Front
Surround Back
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to
“Front”.
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.
Settings
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
None
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover
frequency (default: 80 Hz).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
En
113
Subwoofer
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout”
(p.19).
Settings
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Use
None
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers
will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
■ Level
Layout
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Surround
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Settings
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side
of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works in this case.
• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.
Front Presence
Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This
setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.
Settings
Front Height
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the
front side wall.
Overhead
Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the
ceiling.
Dolby Enabled SP
Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front
presence speakers.
En
114
■ Parametric EQ
5
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Settings
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the
front speakers.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
6
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.39) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Test Tone
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.39). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
1
2
3
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
En
115
Off
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Sound
Adjustment
Configures the audio output settings.
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
■ Lipsync
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3
■ Dynamic Range
Settings
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Settings
Auto/Manual Select
Maximum
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
En
116
■ Initial Volume
■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround
speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Settings
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
Settings
Off
Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
On
Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).
■ Pure Direct Mode
• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.64).
■ Object Decode Mode
Settings
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the
selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the
on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the
wall paper is displayed.
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos
contents.
Settings
Disable
Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be
played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.
Enable
Enables playback of object-based audio signals.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
• Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of
CINEMA DSP programs is selected.
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
Off
Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
En
117
Video
Aspect
Configures the video output settings.
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
Direct
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.131) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)
En
118
HDMI
ARC
Configures the HDMI settings.
Enables/disables ARC (p.153) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Standby Sync
■ HDMI Control
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.151).
Settings
Settings
Off
Disables HDMI Control.
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
■ Audio Output
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.151) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects a device to output audio.
TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.124) is set to “Main”.
Amp
Settings
AUDIO 1–3
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.
Default
AUDIO 1
Settings
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
En
119
Off
Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Network
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Configures the network settings.
Settings
Off
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On
Enables the audio output from the TV.
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
■ Network Connection
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input
selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in
standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
Settings
Off
(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is
set to the power saving mode.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a
commercially-available network cable (p.35)
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the
unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54).
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
En
120
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
■ MAC Address Filter
■ Manual network settings
1
2
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
Filter
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
Settings
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
Off
Disables the MAC address filter.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to
the unit.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
5
6
7
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
• AirPlay (p.82) and DMC (p.101) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
MAC Address 1–10
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Procedure
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
Off
Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Auto
Enables the network standby function.
(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power
saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)
En
121
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
5
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Name
Bluetooth
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
Configures the Bluetooth settings.
■ Procedure
1
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
■ Bluetooth
Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.68).
Settings
Off
Disables the Bluetooth function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth function.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
■ Bluetooth Standby
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth
devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns
on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Settings
Off
Disables the Bluetooth standby function.
On
Enables the Bluetooth standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.121) is set to “Off”.
En
122
Multi Zone
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Configures the multi zone settings.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
■ Main Zone Set
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
volume adjustments for Zone2.
Configures the main zone setting.
Settings
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
■ Procedure
1
2
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.112) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Max Volume
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
En
123
Initial Volume
■ Monitor Out Assign
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Settings
Main, Zone2
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Audio Delay
Settings
Main, Zone2
Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the
video.
Setting range
0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.151).
Mono
Audio Output
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2
Assign” is set to “Zone2”.
Settings
Off
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
On
Enables the audio output.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
Off
Disables the audio output (video output only).
Zone Rename
■ Party Mode Set
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.90).
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.123).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
En
124
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
Function
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.127) is set to “On”.
Short Message
■ Procedure
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
Settings
On
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
2
Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.
En
125
Piano
Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Target Zone
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Settings
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Source
■ Memory Guard
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB
Off
Does not protect the settings.
Settings
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Icon
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
En
126
■ ECO Mode
ECO
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
Configures the power supply settings.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
Off
Disables the eco mode.
On
Enables the eco mode.
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
■ Auto Power Standby
Language
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and
no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Settings
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
English
English
日本語
Japanese
Français
French
Deutsch
German
Español
Spanish
Russian
Italiano
Italian
Chinese
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
En
127
Types of information
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
■ Audio Signal
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
2
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
Format
Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate
The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Input
Output
3
The speaker terminals from which signals are output
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
4
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
■ HDMI Monitor
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
En
128
Interface
TV interface
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
■ Network
■ System
Displays the network information on the unit.
Displays the system information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.131)
IP Address
IP address
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type (p.131)
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Speaker Impedance
The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.130)
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
System ID
System ID number
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address (Ethernet)
MAC address
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.134).
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
vTuner ID
vTuner ID
Network Name
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.122)
Wired/Wireless
The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
(When using Wireless Direct)
SSID
The SSID of the wireless network
Security
Security method
Security Key
Security key
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
MAC address
Network Connection
“Wireless Direct” indication
En
129
Input
The input source selected for Zone2
Volume
The volume for Zone2
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
• Default settings are underlined.
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
3
4
5
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Item
Function
Page
SPEAKER IMP.
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
130
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
131
REMOTE CON AMP
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
131
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
131
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
131
4K MODE
Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format.
132
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
132
INITIALIZE
Restores the default settings.
132
FIRM UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
132
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
133
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
The new settings take effect.
HD 3
¡SPEAKER¡IMP.
¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
En
130
6  MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8  MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
SPIMP.-
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
REMOTESENSOR
ON
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Turns on the remote control sensor.
Turns off the remote control sensor.
Default
Canada model: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
REMOTECONAMP
ID1
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
HD 3
MONITORCHECK
YES
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.118) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
ID1, ID2
Settings
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Settings
OFF
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
ON
TVFORMAT
NTSC
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 (BD/DVD) together for
3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 (TV) together for 3
seconds.
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
En
131
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
4KMODE
MODE2
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
HD 3
Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)
compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.
MODE 1
MODE 2
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.
HD 3
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
HD 3
RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP
FIRMUPDATE
USB
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
■ Firmware update procedure
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
1
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Choices
Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.
(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)
Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.
SPIMP.-
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Settings
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
Choices
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
RECOVERY
Note
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.134).
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
En
132
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
VERSION
x.xx
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.129) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
En
133
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
AV
1
5
2
3
4
6
7
V-AUX
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
AUDIO
1
2
3
PHONO
TUNER
BLUETOOTH
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
TOP MENU
• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.132).
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.129). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
Note
SCENE
3
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.132).
Information
icon
BAND
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
ENT
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
Message
System Icon
1
2
Read the on-screen description.
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
En
134
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.39). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.112).
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.125) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.116). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.123).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.126).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.117). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.124).
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.131).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.99).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu
to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the
unit when this function is enabled.
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.151). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
En
135
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.21).
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.127).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.130).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.21).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of
the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.127).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
En
136
Problem
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Cause
Remedy
The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
(China model only)
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.131).
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.128).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.116).
Audio
Problem
No sound.
The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.128).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.115).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.112).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.114).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
En
137
Problem
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
Cause
Remedy
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.115).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.114).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.119).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.28).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.119).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.119). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.128). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.127).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI
audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.87).
Noise/hum is heard.
The sound is distorted.
The sound is interrupted.
En
138
Video
Problem
No video.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.131).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.128). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.153).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both
the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.
The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the
VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.
To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the
playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.30).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.28).
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.56).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.87).
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The video is interrupted.
En
139
FM/AM radio
Problem
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.99).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Select the station manually (p.65).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Select the station manually (p.65).
The AM radio signal is weak.
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.66).
Auto Preset has been used.
En
140
Bluetooth
Problem
A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.
No sound is produced, or the sound is
interrupted during playback.
Cause
Remedy
The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled.
Enable the Bluetooth function (p.122).
Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.
Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection
(p.68).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP.
Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.
The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is
not working for some reason.
Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a
connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.68).
The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low.
Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.
The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit.
Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.
The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.
Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again
(p.68).
The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart.
Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.
There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that
outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.
Move the unit away from those devices.
En
141
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.120). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.120).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off.
Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart.
Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.75).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.121).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
Wireless network is not found.
The unit does not detect the PC.
En
142
Problem
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
Cause
Remedy
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.121).
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.132).
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
En
143
Error indications on the front display
Message
Cause
Remedy
Access denied
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.75).
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod.
Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.
Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.69).
Access error
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.35).
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod.
Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.131).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.131).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.75). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
No device
Unable to play
En
144
Glossary
Audio information
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Surround
Dolby Atmos
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1
content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional
speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or
products with Dolby speaker technology.
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the
Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces
audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically
throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the
introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is
decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker
systems of every size and configuration.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448
MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.
This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS 96/24
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
Dolby Digital Plus
DTS Digital Surround
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Enabled Speaker
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS-ES
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology
employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the
listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that
can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall
speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby
surround playback.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
En
145
■ Others
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
DTS Neo:6
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
FLAC
Lip sync
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
En
146
HDMI and video information
Network information
Component video signal
SSID
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
Deep Color
WPS
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
Composite video signal
HDCP
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of
digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
En
147
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back
speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear
sound filed of CINEMA DSP.
En
148
■ File formats
Supported devices and file formats
❑ USB/PC (NAS)
■ Supported devices
Sampling
frequency (kHz)
Quantization
bitrate (bit)
Bitrate
The number
of channels
Gapless
playback
WAV *
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
—
2
✔
• A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be
compatible, depending on the model.
MP3
32/44.1/48
—
8 to 320
2
—
WMA
32/44.1/48
—
8 to 320
2
—
❑ USB devices
MPEG-4 AAC
32/44.1/48
—
8 to 320
2
—
• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
FLAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
—
2
✔
ALAC
32/44.1/48/88.2/96
16/24
—
2
✔
AIFF
32/44.1/48/88.2/96/
176.4/192
16/24
—
2
✔
DSD
2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz
1
—
2
—
File
❑ Bluetooth device
• The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.
• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
* Linear PCM format only
❑ iPod
• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Made for.
iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,
iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
(as of May 2015)
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
❑ AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of May 2015)
En
149
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device
The unit
HDMI out
TV
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
m
480p/576p
HDMI in
HDMI out
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
COMPONENT
720p
VIDEO in
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PR
PR
PB
PB
PB
PB
Y
Y
Y
Y
480p/576p
VIDEO
VIDEO
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
1080p
480i/
576i
m
m
m
m
m
1080p
VIDEO in
480i/
576i
m
4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
VIDEO
out
COMPONENT VIDEO out
VIDEO out
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO in
m
480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m: Available
En
150
Multi-zone output
Information on HDMI
■ Audio output
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier
(p.25)
HDMI Control
Using an external amplifier (p.86)
Zone2 Out
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
EXTRA SP jacks
ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
(*1)
Digital audio (HDMI)
m (*2)
m (*2)
m (*3)
Digital audio
(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)
m (*4)
m (*4)
Analog audio (AUDIO)
m
m
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
USB (including iPod) (*5)
m
m
• Standby synchronization
Network sources (*5)
m
m
• Volume control including mute
TUNER
m
m
In
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.28) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.30).
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
m: Available
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)
*2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input
source selected in the main zone is selected)
*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input
*5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.92)
or use the party mode (p.90).
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV
■ Video output
Zone2 Out
In
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
jack (*7)
m
HDMI video
Component video
Composite video
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.57)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
m
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external
device operation keys
m
m: Available
*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
En
151
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
(Example)
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Playback starts
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
2
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
6
7
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
En
152
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
HDMI signal compatibility
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Audio signals
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
Audio signal type
Audio signal format
Compatible media (example)
1
2
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM
8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
DSD
2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD
Bitstream
Dolby Digital, DTS
DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio,
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).
• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
• VGA
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the
AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input
assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.58), you also need to change the input assignment for
SCENE (TV).
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
En
153
Reference diagram (rear panel)
HDMI (HDCP2.2)
HDMI OUT
(HDCP2.2)
2
(ZONE OUT)
1
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
NETWORK
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
( 3 NET )
WIRELESS
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
ARC
AC IN
AV 1
AV 2
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 3
AV 4
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
PB
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PR
AV 2
PB
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
B
1
REMOTE
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
PHONO
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
IN
RS-232C
OUT
2
(2 TV)
A
Y
AV 1
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
L
PB
C
PR Y
AV 3
(SINGLE)
PR
PB
1
2
R
GND
1 OPTICAL
2 OPTICAL
3 COAXIAL
4 COAXIAL
5 COAXIAL
6 OPTICAL
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R BI–AMP
EXTRA SP
ANTENNA
(4 RADIO)
75Ω
FM
AM
SINGLE
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
En
154
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
Trademarks
Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH
All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
This receiver supports network connections.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &
DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and
DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Google Noto Fonts
Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions
and limitations under the License.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Windows™
Explanations regarding GPL
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some
sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and
redistribute this open-source code only. For information on
GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the
GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website
(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha
Corporation is under license.
Android™
Google Play™
Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
En
155
Specifications
Input jacks
Other jacks
TUNER
• Analog Audio
• YPAO MIC x 1
• Analog Tuner
Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
USB
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• RS-232C x 1
• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
HDMI
Bluetooth
Component x 3 (AV 1–3)
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
• Sink Function
Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)
• Video
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)
• Others
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
- 480i/60 Hz
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
- 576i/50 Hz
Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)
• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device
• Bluetooth Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR
• Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP
• Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC
- 480p/60 Hz
Output jacks
- 576p/50 Hz
• Wireless Output............................................. Bluetooth Class 2
• Analog Audio
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft)
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R*1)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Network
- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• Audio Format
- Dolby Atmos
• AirPlay supported
- Dolby TrueHD
• Internet Radio
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- Dolby Digital Plus
- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
- Dolby Digital
- Headphone x 1
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection
• Video
• WiFi function
and USB connection
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- DTS Express
- Composite x 1
- DTS
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Component x 1
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)
• Link Function: CEC supported
En
156
Mode
- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby Atmos
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB
Front L/R ..................................................................140 W/ch
Center......................................................................140 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................140 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................140 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ..................................................................135 W/ch
Center .....................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................135 W/ch
• Post Decoding Format
Surround Back L/R ..................................................135 W/ch
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- Dolby Surround
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )
Front L/R ..................................................................170 W/ch
Center......................................................................170 W/ch
Surround L/R ...........................................................170 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................170 W/ch
(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ..................................................................165 W/ch
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
Center......................................................................165 W/ch
Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W
Center .......................................................................... 120 W
Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
Front L/R ..........................................................110 W+110 W
Center .......................................................................... 110 W
Surround L/R....................................................110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R ..........................................110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Surround L/R ...........................................................165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R ..................................................165 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W
• Damping Factor
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................... 0.04% or less
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 )
............................................................................ 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc..................................................... 110 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
AUDIO 2 etc.............................................75 dB/60 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2
Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more
Center .......................................................................... 120 W
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more
Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB
Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more
Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W
Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more
Audio Section
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )
• Frequency Response
• Output Level / Output Impedance
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ......................................... 1.0 V/470 
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................. 1.0 V/470 
ZONE OUT ............................................................. 1.0 V/470 
• Headphone Impedance .......................................16  or more
En
157
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off
.........................................................................................0.1 W
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[Canada model]...................................87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ......................................................... 65 dB/64 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby Off ........................................................1.4 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,
Bluetooth Standby Off
Wired .............................................................................2.1 W
Wireless (Wi-Fi)..............................................................2.1 W
Wireless Direct ..............................................................2.2 W
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,
Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On
.........................................................................................1.9 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On
.........................................................................................2.9 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
..................... 435 x 182 x 437 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D)
(with wireless antenna upright)
..................... 435 x 247 x 437 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”)
• Weight ...........................................................14.7 kg (32.4 lbs)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%
• Antenna Input ................................................75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Tuning Range
[Canada model]....................................... 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[Canada model].............................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[Canada model].............................................................. 380 W
[Other models]................................................................ 420 W
En
158
Index
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!)
Lock icon (o) 126
Dimmer (Front Display) 125
DLNA 75
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 101
Dolby Atmos 17, 38, 59, 117
DSP Program (front display information)
129, 134
Numerics
2.1-channel system 18
2ch Stereo 62
4K Ultra HD 153
5.1-channel system 18
7.1+2-channel system 17
7.1-channel system 17
7ch Stereo 62
E
ECO 127
Error indication (front display)
External power amplifier 26
Extra Bass 98
HDCP 138, 139
HDMI OUT2 Assign 124
HDMI output selection 56
HDMI signal compatibility 153
Backup/recovery of the settings 132
Banana plug 21
Basic speaker configuration 17
Bluetooth 68
Bookmark 81
Initial Volume 117, 124
Input jack assignment 125
Input Trim 99
Internet radio 79
iPod content playback 69
iPod content playback (AirPlay)
C
L
CINEMA DSP 60
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 117
Compressed Music Enhancer 64
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer)
Lipsync
146
M
39
D
95
O
96
MAC Address Filter 121
Max Volume 116, 123
Memory Guard 126
Menu language selection 37
Multiple room playback 84
En
159
66
R
Remote control 14
Remote control ID 131
Rename 101, 104, 122
Repeat 71, 74, 78
Restoring the default settings
I
B
95
NAS content playback 76
Network Connection 120
Network information 129
Network Name 129
Network Standby 121
Parametric EQ 115
Party mode 90
Power Amp Assign 112
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio)
Pure Direct 64
H
95
N
P
Firmware update 130, 132
FM radio 65
Front display information 95
Adaptive DRC 97
ADVANCED SETUP 130
AirPlay 82
AM radio 65
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 153
Audio Decoder (front display information)
Auto Power Standby 127
Auto Preset (FM radio) 67
56, 90
Option menu
F
A
Decoder Off (front display information)
Dialogue 98, 128
144
Muting
132
S
82
SCENE function 57
Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format
Setup menu 108
Short Message 125
Shuffle 71, 74, 78
Signal information 128
Sleep timer 14, 90
Sound program 60, 61
Speaker impedance 16, 20, 130
Standby Through 110
Straight decode 63
Subwoofer Trim 98
132
Surround decoder
63
T
Test Tone 115
Tone Control 97
Trigger function 36, 126
U
USB storage device content playback
72
V
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 18, 62
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 17
Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)
17, 117
W
Wallpaper 125
Web control 92
Wireless (Wi-Fi) 48, 120
Wireless Direct 54, 120
WPS 50
Y
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)
YPAO Volume 97
39
Z
Zone2
84, 123
En
160
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH115A0/EN
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement